Chevrolet 2002 Monte Carlo Owner`s manual

2002 Chevrolet Monte Carlo
Owner’s Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 10315384 A First Edition
ECopyright General Motors Corporation 06/20/01
All Rights Reserved
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and
the name MONTE CARLO are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will
be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
ii
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols,
used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage
your vehicle.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
In the notice area, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
would not be covered by your warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help
avoid the damage.
D
D
D
D
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
“Engine Compartment Overview”
“Instrument Panel”
“Comfort Controls”
“Audio Systems”
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-10
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-32
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
Rear Seat Passengers
1-35
1-37
1-41
1-54
1-57
1-57
1-57
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you how to adjust the seats and
explains reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Six-Way Power Seat (Option)
D Raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion
by sliding the front of the control up or down.
D Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion by
sliding the rear of the control up or down.
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, the control
is located on the outboard side of the front seats toward
the front of each seat cushion. To adjust the seat
cushion, do any of the following:
D Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control to the front or the rear.
D Raise or lower the seat cushion by sliding the control
up or down.
The knob that operates this feature is located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat. Turn the knob forward
to increase lumbar support. Turn the knob rearward to
decrease lumbar support.
1-3
Heated Front Seat (Option)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
this option, the switches
that control the seats
temperature are located
on the center console.
There are two settings, LO and HI.
Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature. Press
HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature. To turn this
feature off, move the switch to the center position.
1-4
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move
the seatback to where you want it. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in place. Pull up on the lever
without pushing on the seatback, and the seatback
will move forward.
CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Seatback Latches
There is a latch located on
the lower back of the front
seat that enables the front
seatback to fold forward.
This allows more room for entry and exit of rear
seat passengers.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
To fold the locked seatback forward, push the seatback
toward the rear and lift the latch. The seatback will fold
forward. The latch must be down for the seat to
work properly.
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Easy Entry Manual Seat
The right front passenger seat is designed to make it
easy to get into and out of the rear seat.
1. Lift the latch on the back of the right front seat and
tilt the seatback forward. The seat will slide or can
be pushed forward to allow someone to get into or
out of the rear seat area.
2. Return the seatback upright to lock it. Slide the seat
fully rearward to lock it into its original position.
3. The front passenger must try to slide the entire
seat back and forth to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
CAUTION:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After
you’ve used it, be sure to slide the easy entry
seat back and forth to be sure it is locked.
1-7
2. Pull forward on the
seatback tab located on
the outboard side of the
back seat cushion to fold
the seatback down.
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the seatback (or both sides)
down in your vehicle for more cargo space. Make sure
the front seat isn’t reclined. If it is, the rear seatback
may not fold down all the way.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
1. Remove the rear center
lap-shoulder belt latch
by using a key to press
the release button.
This will allow you direct access to the trunk.
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-8
CAUTION:
2. Reconnect the center
safety belt latch plate
to the buckle.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:
1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.
Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
in position.
Make sure the safety belt label is pointing to the
release button, and that both are facing the front of
the vehicle. Make sure the belt is not twisted. Push
and pull on the latch plate to be sure it is secure.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position. If you plan to load items
into the trunk through the split folding rear seat,
you must first turn off the trunk release sensor.
See “Trunk Release Sensor” in the Index for
more information.
1-9
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-10
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
or the instrument panel ...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-13
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in
an accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children and babies. If
a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part
of this manual called “Children.” Follow those
rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-15
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-16
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Your vehicle may also have a side impact air bag for the
driver. If your vehicle has a side impact air bag for the
driver it will say AIR BAG on the air bag covering on
the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has air bags -- a frontal air bag for
the driver and another frontal air bag for the right
front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-23
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag systems:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are designed to work with safety belts but
don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-24
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air bags have provided in the
past. The side impact air bag for the driver is
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the driver’s side
of the vehicle. It isn’t designed to inflate
in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for air bag inflation before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle, and should not lean on the door.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Children.”
1-25
There is an air bag
readiness light on
the instrument panel,
which shows the
air bag symbol.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-26
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-27
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other air bag
covering. Don’t let seat covers block the inflation
path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”
1-28
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph
(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
The driver’s side impact air bag is designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes involving the driver’s
door. The side impact air bag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design.
The driver’s side impact air bag is not designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers
or rear impacts, because inflation would not help
the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For the side impact
air bag, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the driver’s
seatback closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not
toward the air bag. The side impact air bag would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
that air bag. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe side
collisions for the driver’s side impact air bag.
1-29
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the driver’s side impact
air bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from
leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
1-30
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using
the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a
crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records
information about the frontal air bag system. The
module records information about the readiness of the
system, when the system commands air bag inflation
and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. The
module also records speed, engine rpm, brake and
throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bag systems. Improper service can mean that an
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or
the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace
the air bag module in the steering wheel, both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s side
impact air bag. Do not open or break the air
bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to an
air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the air bag systems.
Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-31
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here’s how to wear one properly.
1-32
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure
the release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-33
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-34
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better
positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-35
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-36
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide
and clip inward and in between the seatback and interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions” earlier
in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use
the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
1-37
CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-38
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it will be used.
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-39
CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant
in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
1-40
CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
Restraint Systems for Children
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-41
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-42
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
Q:
A:
How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
1-43
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in the rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-44
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top
strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the
rear seat on the filler panel.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
1-45
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll find
anchors (A) in all three rear seating positions.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH
system will have dots on the seat cover directly above
the anchors.
A. Vehicle anchor
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
1-46
B. LATCH system attachment points
C. Top strap
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
CAUTION:
A. Vehicle anchor
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be able
to protect a child sitting there. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed. Make
sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position” in the Index for information
on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belts.
B. LATCH system attachment points
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to
use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back
of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See “Top Strap” in the
Index. Tighten the top strap according to the child
restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect
the anchor points.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH)” in the Index.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-48
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH)” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-51
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-52
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-53
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-54
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that
in a crash the child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting
in a rear seat outside position, see “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must be
used by only one person at a time.
1-55
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-56
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach
it to the regular safety belt.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-57
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
1-58
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time
of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-8
2-12
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-32
2-33
2-37
2-38
2-40
2-40
Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
Trunk
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
Vehicle Customization Settings
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-49
2-52
2-54
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-66
2-67
2-70
2-72
2-75
2-87
2-95
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Accessory Power Outlet
Auxiliary Power Connection (Power Drop)
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
Power Sunroof (Option)
HomeLinkR Transmitter (Option)
The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Message Center
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Option)
2-1
Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-2
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rear of
the switch, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the rear of the switch is pressed and held,
the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the
front of the switch.
Both doors have power window switches located on
the armrest. The switches on the driver’s door armrest
control each of the windows when the ignition is in ON,
ACC, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” in
the Index.
2-3
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-4
This key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer for
assistance. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See “Roadside Assistance” in the
Index for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the
vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See “OnStar” in the Index for
more information.
2-5
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-6
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the optional remote
keyless entry transmitter. From the inside, use the
manual or power door locks.
To unlock either front door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of the
vehicle. To lock either front door from the outside with
your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear of
the vehicle.
To lock the door from the inside, push the manual lock
lever forward. To unlock the door, pull the lever rearward.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is
located on each front door
above the armrest.
Programmable automatic power door locks are a standard
feature that is intended to provide enhanced security and
convenience by automatically locking and unlocking doors.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Mode 2: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P); no automatic door unlock.
Mode 3: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P); automatic unlock for the driver’s
door only when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
Press the top part of the switch to unlock both doors, or
press the bottom part of the switch to lock both doors.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system and it is armed, the power door lock switches
will be disabled. You must use your remote keyless
entry transmitter (if equipped) or your key to unlock the
doors when the system is armed.
Mode 4: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P); automatic all-door unlock
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 4. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it left
the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, see “Vehicle Customization Settings”
in the Index.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not change any previously programmed modes.
2-7
Lockout Protection Feature
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle,
this feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If a power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, both doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock. A chime will sound
continuously until both doors are closed.
Leaving Your Vehicle
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2-8
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
Use the remote keyless
entry transmitter to
open or lock your
vehicle’s doors or your
trunk from a distance.
(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol to activate an alarm on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The ignition must be in OFF or ACC for the
panic alarm to work. When you press the panic button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the headlamps
will flash, the horn will honk repeatedly and your
interior lamps will illuminate attracting attention if you
need it. The alarm will continue until one of the
following occurs:
D The panic alarm button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed a second time,
Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
LOCK: Press the LOCK button to lock all doors.
UNLOCK: Press the UNLOCK button on the remote
keyless transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door and
turn on the interior lamps. See “Illumination and
Remote Activation” in the Index for more details. Pause
for about one second, then press UNLOCK again within
five seconds to unlock the passenger door.
D the vehicle’s ignition is turned to ON or
D an alarm period of about 110 seconds has elapsed.
(Trunk Release): Press the button on the remote
keyless transmitter with the vehicle symbol on it to
release the trunk.
Operating the remote keyless entry transmitter may
interact with the content theft-deterrent system (if your
vehicle this option). See “Content Theft-Deterrent
System” in the Index.
2-9
Transmitter Verification (If Equipped)
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
This feature provides feedback to the holder of the remote
keyless entry transmitter that a command has been
received by the keyless entry receiver. The headlamps and
back-up lamps will flash on every lock and the first unlock
command, and the horn will sound once for every lock
and twice for the first unlock command. Silent operation
and other options may be selected for this feature. See
“Vehicle Customization Settings” in the Index.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time the remote unlock is received, three
flashes will be seen and three horn chirps heard to indicate
an alarm condition has occurred since last arming. See
“Content Theft-Deterrent System” in the Index.
Illumination on Remote Activation
This feature provides interior illumination when a
remote keyless entry door unlock command is received
and executed, the trunk release button is pressed or
when the panic alarm is activated. The interior lamps
will illuminate until the ignition is turned to ON or until
an illumination period of 40 seconds has elapsed or the
doors are locked with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. If a door is opened
during the illumination period, the timed illumination
will be canceled, and the interior lamps will remain on.
2-10
If you prefer, you can complete this procedure yourself.
See “Vehicle Customization Settings” in the Index for
more information.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
To replace the battery use the following steps:
1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the
back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the front
and back.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Put the new battery into the transmitter as shown
on the transmitter. Use type CR2032 battery
or equivalent.
4. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
halves are together tightly so water won’t get in.
5. Resynchronize and then test the transmitter.
Resynchronization
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
After you have changed the battery in your transmitter,
you will need to resynchronize the transmitter. To do
this, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
transmitter at the same time and hold for approximately
seven seconds or until one brief horn chirp is heard.
2-11
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal between the body and the
trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT and the outside air mode button
pressed. That will force outside air into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-12
Trunk Lock
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key in
the lock and turn it. You can also press the car symbol
on your remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
Remote Trunk Release
You can also unlock the trunk from inside the vehicle.
Press the button located
below the exterior lamps
control on the underside of
the dashboard. The shift
lever must be in PARK (P)
for the remote trunk release
button to work.
Trunk Assist Handle
Pull down on the handle to lower the trunk lid. Then
close the trunk with your other hand. If the trunk is
not properly closed, the TRUNK OPEN message will
appear in the message center of your instrument panel
cluster. See “Trunk Open Message” in the Index for
more information.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle
located inside the trunk on the latch. This handle will
glow following exposure to light. Pull the release handle
up to open the trunk from the inside.
Trap-Resistant Trunk Kit
There is an assist handle located on the inside of the
trunk lid toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
NOTICE:
The trunk assist handle was not designed to be
used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchor
point when securing items in the trunk. Improper
use of the trunk assist handle could damage it.
To help prevent a child from becoming trapped in your
trunk, you can order a trap-resistant trunk kit from your
dealer. This kit includes the following:
D a modified trunk latch,
D a lighted release handle, and
D seatback tethers (for vehicles with folding
rear seatbacks).
See your dealer for additional information.
2-13
Trunk Release Sensor TrapAlert
(If Equipped)
t System
Your vehicle may have a sensor located on the underside
of the filler panel inside the trunk.
If your vehicle has this feature, the sensor is designed
to open the trunk automatically under certain conditions.
If the sensor detects motion and a difference in
temperature in the trunk, the sensor will sound the horn
if the ignition is in OFF. There will be three short chirps
and a pause repeated for up to two minutes. After one
minute, the trunk latch will release. If the ignition is not
in OFF, the trunk latch will not release automatically
and the horn will not sound.
To cancel the horn alarm and automatically release the
trunk lid before two minutes are up, turn the ignition
to ON.
Do not cover the sensor with items you put into the
trunk or with add-on accessory equipment. If the
sensor’s field of view is blocked, it will not detect
motion and will not function properly.
Be sure to secure items in your trunk so that they
won’t move around and cause the trunk to open.
2-14
Disabling the Trunk Release Sensor
Next to the sensor lens, there is a disable button you
can use to turn off the trunk release sensor. To turn
off the sensor, turn the ignition to ON and press the
button next to the lens for two seconds. The horn
will chirp once when the sensor is turned off. When
the sensor is off, the light in the button will flash. The
TRUNK OPEN message in the message center will flash
for one minute each time the ignition is turned on as
a reminder that the sensor is turned off. See “Trunk
Open Message” in the Index.
To turn the sensor on again, press the button again
or open the trunk. When the trunk is opened, the
sensor is automatically turned back on. If the sensor is
turned back on with the disable button the horn will
chirp twice.
A. Sensor Lens
B. Disable Button
Because the sensor detects motion, there are times when
you may want to turn off the trunk sensor so that the
motion of your vehicle or items in the trunk won’t cause
the trunk to open, such as the following:
D When your vehicle is transported on a car ferry,
D when your vehicle is towed, or
D when you will be loading items through the opening
in the split folding rear seat (if equipped).
Servicing the Trunk Release Sensor
The sensor lens should be inspected periodically.
If the lens is dirty, wipe it gently with a clean, soft
cotton cloth.
If there is an electrical problem with the sensor, the
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON message will appear in the
message center. There are other possible reasons for this
message to appear. Be sure to see your dealer as soon as
possible. See “Service Vehicle Soon Message” in the
Index for more information.
2-15
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key?
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s
door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove
your key from the ignition and take it with you.
Always do this. Your ignition and transaxle will be
locked. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-16
D If possible, park in a busy, well-lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk
or glove box.
D
D
D
D
D
Be sure to close and lock the storage area.
Close all windows.
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
Content Theft-Deterrent (Option)
Your vehicle may have the optional content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, a light on the radio will flash.
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The light on the
radio should come on and stay on. If you are using
the remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
3. Close all doors. The light on the radio will slowly
flash once the system is armed.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key) or turns the ignition on with an
incorrect key. The horn will sound and the headlamps
and back-up lamps will flash for approximately
two minutes.
When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be opened with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you use the key
to open the trunk, the alarm will sound. Also, the power
door lock switches are disabled. You must use your
remote keyless entry transmitter or your key to unlock
the doors when the system is armed.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power
lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the trunk
is open and the key is removed from the ignition.
The light on the radio flashes quickly to let you know
when the system is ready to arm with the power door
lock switches. The light on the radio will stop flashing
and stay on when you press the bottom of the power
lock switch, to let you know the system is arming.
After all doors and the trunk are closed and locked, the
light on the radio will flash slowly to let you know the
system is armed.
2-17
Arming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm when you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is
not in the ignition. The light on the radio will turn on to
let you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the trunk are closed and locked, the light on the radio
will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The light on the radio will go off to let you know the
system is no longer armed.
The first time a remote UNLOCK command is
received, three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since
last arming.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the doors. The light on the radio will go off
to let you know the system is no longer armed.
2-18
Vehicle Customization Settings
Some of the convenience features can be reset or
customized to perform according to your preference.
The features you can program depend upon the options
that came with your vehicle. The following list shows
features that can be reset or customized along with those
options.
D
D
D
D
D
Settings (Available for All)
Oil Life Reset (Available for All)
Low Tire Pressure Reset
Delayed Headlamp Illumination (Available for All)
Automatic Door Lock and Unlock
(Available for All)
D Remote Visual Verification (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
D Remote Audible Verification (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
D Content Theft Operation (Available with Content
Theft System)
D Trunk Jamb (Available with Content Theft System)
D Horn Chirp On Timer (Available with Remote
Keyless Entry)
D Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming
The following information shows how to reset or
customize features after entering the main menu:
D Return to Original Factory Settings
SETTINGS -- Display Current Settings
(Available with Remote Keyless Entry)
(Available for All)
D Exit Vehicle Customization Mode
Entering Programming Mode: To reset or customize
the features, you must first enter the vehicle
customization main menu. To enter the main menu, do
the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON. The radio must
be off.
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP button on the
radio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS
is displayed.
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows to scroll
through each available feature on your main menu.
4. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons to scroll
through the lower menu. An asterisk (*) will appear
next to the item that is the current setting.
OIL LIFE (Oil Life System Reset): This feature
allows you to reset the GM Oil Life Systemt Monitor
after an oil change. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE system accidentally
at any time other than when the oil has been changed.
It can’t be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light from the
instrument panel cluster and reset the oil life system,
do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until OIL LIFE appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will then be displayed.
3. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will be
displayed for one second.
The CHANGE ENGINE OIL light is now reset. You
can either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
2-19
TIRE MON (Tire Inflation Monitor Reset): This
feature allows you to reset the tire pressure monitor after
checking all tire pressures. See “Tires” in the Index. To
clear the LOW TIRE PRESSURE light from the
instrument panel cluster and reset the low tire pressure
monitor, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until TIRE MON appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
3. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will be
displayed for one second.
The low tire pressure monitor is now reset. You can
either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
LT DELAY (Delayed Headlamp Illumination):
This feature allows the vehicle’s headlamps and parking
lamps to stay on for a fixed amount of time after you
exit the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: 30 SEC -- 30 seconds.
Mode 3: 60 SEC -- 60 seconds.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which
your vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until LT DELAY appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-20
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk for one second.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
AUTOLOCK (Automatic Door Lock and Unlock):
With the ignition in ON and the vehicle’s doors closed,
this feature allows the vehicle doors to automatically
lock and unlock when the driver shifts the vehicle’s
transaxle into and out of PARK (P).
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: LCK ONLY -- Automatic door lock
on/automatic door unlock off.
Mode 3: DRVR UNL -- Automatic door lock
on/automatic door unlock on (driver’s door only).
Mode 4: ALL UNL -- Automatic door lock
on/automatic door unlock on.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 4. The mode to which your
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until AUTOLOCK appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-21
FOB LIGHT (Remote Visual Verification):
This feature allows the exterior lights to flash when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock
or unlock the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: ON -- One flash for each remote lock/two
flashes for each remote unlock.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it left
the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB LIGHT appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-22
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. A new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time a remote UNLOCK command is
received, three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps
heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since
last arming. See “Content Theft-Deterrent System” in
the Index.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
FOB HORN (Remote Audible Verification): This
feature allows the horn to chirp when the remote keyless
entry transmitter is used to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: PARTIAL -- One chirp for each remote LOCK
command/no chirp for remote UNLOCK command.
Mode 3: FULL -- One chirp for each remote
LOCK command/two chirps for the first remote
UNLOCK command.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle
was programmed may have been changed since it left
the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB HORN appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrent
system, the first time the remote UNLOCK command
is received three chirps will be heard to indicate an
alarm condition has occurred since last arming. See
“Content Theft-Deterrent System” in the Index.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-23
ALARM (Content Theft Operation): This feature
allows the content theft-deterrent system to be turned
on or off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: ALRM OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: ALRM ON -- Turns feature on.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was
programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which your
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle to a
different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until ALARM appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-24
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
TRNKJAMB (Trunk Jamb): This feature allows the
content theft system trunk lock sensor to be disabled or
enabled.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: TRNK OFF -- Turns feature off.
Mode 2: TRNK ON -- Turns feature on.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it
was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which your
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory.
To determine the mode to which your vehicle is
programmed or to program your vehicle to a different
mode, do the following:
CHIRP (Horn Chirp Timer): This feature allows you
to choose between short or long horn chirp sounds when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until TRNKJAMB appears on the display.
Programmable Modes
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 2: LONG -- Long Chirp
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Mode 1: SHORT -- Short Chirp
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which
your vehicle was programmed may have been changed
since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until CHIRP appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter
the submenu. The current selection will have an
asterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the directions later
in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
3. Scroll, using the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons,
through the modes to change the current mode.
2-25
4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
FOB PROG (Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Programming): This feature allows you to match
the remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle.
To match the transmitter do the following:
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until FOB PROG appears on the display.
ORIG. SET (Return to the Original Settings):
This feature allows you to return all customization
feature settings back to their original factory settings.
To reset do the following:
3. Press the TUNE DISP button to start programming.
When the message PUSH FOB flashes, press and
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the first
transmitter at the same time for 15 seconds. A chime
will be heard to verify the transmitter is learned.
1. Scroll, using the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrows,
until ORIG. SET appears on the display.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. SET ALL will appear.
3. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE
DISP button to select. A chime will be heard to
verify the new setting. The new selection will be
displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.
The original factory settings are now reset. You can
either exit the programming mode by following the
instructions later in this section or program the next
feature available on your vehicle.
2. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. BEGIN will be displayed.
4. Repeat Step 3 for each additional transmitter.
The transmitter is programmed now. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
EXIT (Exit Feature Customization Mode): This
feature allows you to exit the vehicle customization
programming. To exit do the following:
D Scroll until EXIT appears on the display.
D Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify the exit.
2-26
PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled and the
engine will not start.
During normal operation, the SECURITY message will
be displayed after the key is turned to the ON ignition
position. See “Message Center, Security” in the Index.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn
the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index. See your dealer for service.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
In an emergency, contact Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index
for more information.
2-27
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
The ignition switch is
located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the
steering column.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
ACC (Accessory): This is the position in which you
can operate your electrical accessories. With the key
in this position, the ignition and automatic transaxle
will unlock.
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the
switch to four positions.
OFF: This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. Removing the key locks your ignition
and automatic transaxle.
2-28
ON: This is the position the switch returns to after you
start the engine and release the switch. The switch stays
in ON when the engine is running. But even when the
engine is not running, you can use ON to operate your
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster messages and warning lights.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate electrical accessories, such as the radio.
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s
door while the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the
key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With Retained Accessory Power (RAP), your power
windows, audio system and sunroof (option) will
continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is turned to OFF and none of the doors are open.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-29
Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine warms up.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down
while you turn the key to START. Do this until the
engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.
2-30
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on temperature.
When the engine starts, release the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in
START for about 10 seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing. This time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the
engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the
normal starting procedure.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
2-31
Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is attached to the underside of the vehicle’s
diagonal brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner. /filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32_F (0_C), use of the
coolant heater is not required.
2-32
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The above graphic is displayed on your instrument
panel cluster.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic
transaxle vehicles when you’re in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline components
from improper operation.
Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever located on the
console between the front seats.
2-33
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”
in the Index.
2-34
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You must fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in ON. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it
all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal
pushed down and the shift lever button pressed in.
Release the shift lever button. Then move the shift lever
out of PARK (P). See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”
in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
D going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
D going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly,
or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster,
something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way,
your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds.
2-35
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
D When going down a steep hill.
D When driving in non-highway scenarios
(i.e. city streets, etc.).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25 miles
(40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h), or you
can damage your transaxle. Use AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) as much as possible.
NOTICE: (Continued)
2-36
NOTICE: (Continued)
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object.
You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver’s door.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with
your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking
brake pedal will follow it to the released position.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK (P).
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-37
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
D Press and hold in the shift lever button located on
the left side of the shift lever.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
D Push the shift lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-38
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you’ve moved the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then,
see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you (or, if you have the
console shift lever, without first pushing the button).
If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some
of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-39
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You must fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in ON. See “Automatic Transaxle Operation”
in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Then move
the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sure to press the
shift lever button.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal until the end
of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-40
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-41
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.
2-42
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Press at or near the horn symbols on your steering wheel
pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can raise it to the highest
level to give your legs more room when you exit and
enter. The lever to adjust it is located on the left side of
the steering column.
To adjust the wheel, hold
the steering wheel and
pull the lever. Move the
steering wheel to a
comfortable position,
and release the lever to
lock the wheel into place.
The lever located on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
D Turn Signal and Lane-Change Signals
D
D
D
D
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
For information on the exterior lamps, see “Exterior
Lamps” later in this section.
2-43
Turn Signal and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a
turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
2-44
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
Turn Signal On Chime
If you leave either one of your turn signals on and
drive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound
to alert you.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change your headlamps from low beams to high
beams, or from high to low, pull the multifunction lever
all the way toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light will appear on
the instrument panel cluster.
This light works only when the key is in ON. The fog
lamps (if equipped) are not illuminated when the high
beams are on.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,
pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch to
high-beam, (to signal you are going to pass).
If the headlamps are on, they will return to low -beam
when the lever is released. This feature operates even if
the headlamps are off.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wipers will operate when the ignition is
in ACC or ON.
WIPER: To operate the windshield wipers, turn the
band labeled WIPER, located on the multifunction lever,
upward or downward.
OFF: To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
The five marks between OFF and LO are delay settings.
For a longer delay between wiping cycles, turn the band
downward. For a shorter delay between wiping cycles
turn the band upward.
LO (Low Speed): Turn the band upward to LO for
steady wiping at a low speed.
Hi (High Speed): Turn the band upward to HI for
steady wiping at high speed.
MIST: Turn the band downward to MIST for a single
wiping cycle. Hold the band at this setting until the
windshield wipers start, then release it. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wipe. If additional cycles are
needed, hold the band on MIST longer.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload. If your blades
become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
2-45
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle
with the windshield washer symbol and the word PUSH
on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the
paddle. The wipers will run for several sweeps and then
either stop or return to your preset speed. The ignition
key must be in ACC or ON for this to work. See
“Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
United States
Canada
The LOW WASHER FLUID message in the message
center will appear when the fluid level is low.
When you are low on washer fluid, the LOW WASHER
FLUID message will be illuminated in the message
center for 60 seconds. After 60 seconds, it will go out.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will appear
again for three seconds as a reminder that the fluid level
is low.
Until the fluid tank is refilled, every time you start your
vehicle, the LOW WASHER FLUID message will be
illuminated in the message center for 60 seconds and
then go out. Be sure to check the fluid level and refill
the tank right away.
2-46
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where
D
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (optional) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
“Traction Control System” in the Index. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Press CRUISE ON/OFF
located on the steering
wheel to turn the cruise
control on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
2-47
3. Press SET located on your steering wheel and
release it.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Press SET on the steering wheel, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise
at the higher speed.
D Press ACC (Accelerate) on the steering wheel. Hold
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press RES (Resume) on
your steering wheel. You’ll
go right back up to your
chosen speed and stay there.
it there until you get up to the speed you want and
then release the button. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, press ACC briefly and then
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you set
the cruise control speed by pressing SET on the
steering wheel.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
D Press COAST on the steering wheel until you reach
the lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press COAST
on the steering wheel briefly. Each time you do this,
you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
2-48
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to cancel the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal.
D Press CRUISE ON/OFF on the steering wheel.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
The exterior lamp control is located on the instrument
panel, to the left of the steering wheel.
It controls the following systems:
D
D
D
D
D
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2-49
The exterior lamps control has three positions:
OFF: Pushing the control all the way in turns off the
exterior lamps.
Parking Lamps: Pulling the control out halfway will
turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
D Taillamps
D License Plate Lamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
Headlamps: Pulling the control all the way out turns on
the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps
and lights. See “Interior Lamps” later in this section for
information on the instrument panel brightness control
and on the dome lamps. A warning chime will sound if
you open the driver’s door when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) /
Automatic Headlamp Control
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
2-50
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system’s automatic headlamp control will
make your high-beam headlamps come on at a reduced
brightness when the following conditions are met:
D The ignition is on,
D the exterior lamps control is off and
D the gearshift is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your high-beam
headlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, will be on.
The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps
won’t be on. Your instrument panel and cluster won’t
be lit up either.
When it’s dark enough outside, your high-beam
headlamps will turn off and the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come on with
your headlamps will also come on.
When it’s bright enough outside, your headlamps will
go off and your DRL will come on.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Delayed Headlamp Illumination
Delayed headlamp illumination provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave the area. The feature is
activated when the headlamps are on due to the
automatic headlamp control feature described previously
in this section, and when the ignition is turned off. Your
headlamps will then remain on until the exterior lamp
control is moved from OFF to the parking lamp position
or until either a 30 second or 60 second lighting period
has ended.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
The fog lamps button is
located on the instrument
panel next to the exterior
lamps control wheel to the
left of the steering column.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp control
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the delayed
headlamp illumination cycle will not occur.
To disable the delayed headlamp illumination feature or
change the time of delay, see “Vehicle Customization
Settings” in the Index.
Your ignition must be ON for the fog lamps
to illuminate.
To turn the fog lamps on press the FOG button.
A light will glow in the button to let you know that
the fog lamps are on. Press the FOG button again
to turn the fog lamps off.
Your parking lamps must be on or your fog lamps
won’t come on.
The fog lamps will go off whenever you change to
high-beam headlamps. When you return to low beams,
the fog lamps will come on again.
2-51
Interior Lamps
Illuminated Entry (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
This feature controls the instrument panel lights
Your courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
The control for this feature is located on the exterior
lamps control Your parking lamps must be on for this
feature to work. Turn the control clockwise to brighten
the lights or counterclockwise to dim them.
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after
you close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t open a
door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.
Courtesy Lamps
Illuminated entry includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly
dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay
time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to ON or
press the power door lock switch.
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle. You can also manually turn
these lamps on by turning the exterior lamps control
clockwise all the way.
The reading lamps, located on the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off independent of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed.
2-52
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unless a
door is opened. If the ignition is on, the light will come
on only when the driver’s door is opened.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting to
work. Immediately after both doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to work
until one of the following occurs:
D The ignition is in moved to ON,
D the doors are locked or
D an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of time
after the key is removed from the ignition.
The vehicle’s ignition must be off for delayed exit
lighting to work.
When the key is removed, interior illumination will
activate and remain on until one of the following occurs:
D The ignition is moved to ON,
D the power door locks are activated or
D an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on.
Parade Mode
The instrument panel has an added feature called
parade mode. This feature prohibits the dimming of
your instrument panel displays during the daylight
while the headlamps are on so that you’ll still be able
to see the displays.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the rearview mirror.
These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps come
on when any door is opened. Press the button to turn
them on when the doors are closed. Press it again to
turn them off.
2-53
Dome Lamp
Mirrors
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn this lamp on by turning the exterior
lamp control clockwise as far as it will go.
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Battery Rundown Protection
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror with
Map Lamps
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case you accidentally leave on the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity
lamps, trunk lamp or glove box lamps. If you leave any
of these lamps on, they will automatically turn off after
10 minutes, if the ignition is moved to OFF. The lamps
won’t come back on again until you do the following:
D Turn the ignition on or
D turn the exterior lamps control off, then on again.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the
odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after
only three minutes.
Battery rundown protection will also work if the
headlamps are left on. After having been left on for
10 minutes, the headlamps and the parking lamps will
flash three times. They will remain on for one more
minute before being turned off automatically.
2-54
To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pull the
lever at the bottom of the mirror toward you (to the
night position). To return the mirror back to the day
position, push the lever away from you.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Each lamp is turned on and off by pressing the
button next to the lamp.
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror with
OnStarR and Map Lamps (Option)
This mirror has a lever located at the bottom of the
mirror between the two map lamps. This lever is used to
change the mirror from day to night position. To reduce
glare from headlamps behind you while driving at night,
turn the lever 90 degrees. To return the mirror back to
the day position, return the lever to its original position.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Each lamp is turned on and off by pressing the
button next to the lamp.
There are also three OnStar buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See “OnStarR System” in the Index for
more information about the services OnStar provides.
Electrochromic Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror (Option)
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic day/night
rearview mirror.
Push the button in the center of the mirror to turn this
feature on. The mirror will darken gradually to reduce
glare from headlamps behind you. This may take a few
moments. The mirror will lighten whenever you shift
to REVERSE (R).
2-55
There are also two map lamps located on the bottom of
the mirror. Each lamp is turned on and off by pressing
the button next to the lamp.
There are two map lamps located on the bottom of the
mirror. Each lamp is turned on and off by pressing the
button next to the lamp.
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it
is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn the
electrochromic feature off, press the button in the
center of the mirror again.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
with OnStarR and Map Lamps (Option)
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic
day/night rearview mirror with the OnStar System.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by
pressing the far left button, located on the lower part of
the mirror face, for up to three seconds. When turned on,
this mirror functions exactly like the electrochromic
mirror described previously.
2-56
There are also three OnStar buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See “OnStarR System” in the Index for
more information about the services OnStar provides.
Power Outside Rearview Mirrors
The power mirror
controls are located
near the driver’s side
window, on the armrest.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
Use the selector switch located above the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press any of the four arrows located on the
control pad to move each mirror in the desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Heated Outside Mirrors (Option)
If your vehicle has this option the surface of both
outside mirrors will heat when you activate the rear
window defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger”
in the Index.
2-57
Storage Compartments
Trunk Convenience Net (If Equipped)
Glove Box
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
on the back wall of the trunk.
Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box.
To open, lift the latch.
Center Console
The console has cupholders, a cassette tape storage area
and a coinholder. To open the console’s storage area,
press the latch located toward the front of the console
lid on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Rear Seat Armrest and Cupholders
To access the rear cupholders, pull down on the
cloth strap located toward the top of the center
back seat cushion. You will then have access to
the dual cupholders.
2-58
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind or inside the
net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp
turns or quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store those in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Ashtrays and Lighter
The removable front ashtray is located on the console
and fits into the cupholder.
The ashtray is removable with a cupholder and liner
underneath. To remove the ashtray, lift up on the ashtray
and liner and pull the ashtray out. The ashtray assembly
can be stored until needed.
The rear ashtray is located behind a small door at the
rear of the console. Push on the right side of the door.
The ashtray will then turn to the right for usage. You can
only access the ashtray by pushing on the door’s right
side. To remove the ashtray, push down on the snuffer
located in the middle of the ashtray and lift it out.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or
other smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also move them from side to side. The visors also
have extenders that you can pull out for added coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror.
If your vehicle has the lighted vanity mirrors, the lamps
come on when you open the cover.
2-59
Accessory Power Outlet
Your vehicle has a 12-volt outlet which can be used to
plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone,
a compact disc player, etc.
It is located at the rear of
the console.
NOTICE:
When using accessory power outlets:
D Maximum load of any outlet should not
exceed the amperage rating.
D Be sure to turn off electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods can
drain the battery.
NOTICE:
Lift the cover to access the outlet. When not using the
outlet, make sure the protective cover is in place.
The accessory power outlet will only operate while the
ignition is ON and for a few minutes after turning the
ignition OFF. If you would like to operate an accessory
for an extended period of time, see your dealer for
more information.
2-60
Certain accessory power plugs may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power plugs.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the amperage rating.
Auxiliary Power Connection
(Power Drop)
Your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary power
connection. This feature provides power, ground
and accessory wires which can be accessed to add
aftermarket electrical equipment to your vehicle.
The auxiliary power
connection is located on
the passenger side of the
vehicle, under the glove
box, and is labeled with
a wire function and
fuse rating.
NOTICE:
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
2-61
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
For information on accessing the connection and
electrical hookup, refer to the service manual. To order a
service manual, see “Service Publications, Ordering” in
the Index.
2-62
OnStarRSystem (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that
offers a variety of services and provides a one-touch
hands-free communication link between you and the
OnStar Center. To receive OnStar services, a service
subscription agreement is required and an additional
fee may be required. Services are available 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week. For more information,
call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).
(OnStar Services Button): Press this button once
to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Communication button to cancel the
automatic redial.
(Emergency Button): In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
(Communication Button): Press this button
at the end of a call. Also press this button to answer
a call from the center, or cancel a call if one of the
other buttons is accidentally pressed. This button is
also used to access OnStar Personal Calling and
Virtual Advisor services. See the OnStar owner
package for more information.
Volume Control: You can control the volume
of the OnStar System using either the volume knob
on the radio or, if equipped, the steering wheel
volume controls.
(Telltale Light): This light will indicate the status of
the system. A solid green light will come on when you
start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on
and is ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green, it means that an incoming or
outgoing call is in progress. Press the Communication
button if you notice the light blinking and you are not
on a call.
The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar Services
button to attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection
is made, an advisor will assist you with steps to take to
make sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.
2-63
Cellular Antenna
The cellular antenna on the outside of your vehicle is
critical to effective communications using the OnStar
system. Optimum cellular reception can be obtained
when the mast is straight up and down.
OnStar Services
The following services are available within OnStar service
plans. Your vehicle comes with a specific one-year service
plan that allows use of some of all of the following services.
D Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment :
If an air bag deploys, a priority emergency signal is
automatically sent to the center. An advisor will locate
your vehicle’s position, try to contact you and assist
you in the situation. If the center is unable to contact
you, an emergency service provider will be contacted.
D Stolen Vehicle Tracking: Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report
your vehicle stolen, the system can then attempt to
locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will
assist the proper authorities.
D Roadside Assistance with Location: For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar Services button.
An advisor will contact the appropriate help.
2-64
D Remote Diagnostics: If an instrument panel
light comes on, press the OnStar services button.
An advisor can perform a check of the engine
on-board computer, and recommend what
action needs to be taken.
D OnStar MED-NET: Med-Net can store your
personal medical history and provide it to emergency
personnel if necessary. (Requires activation and
additional fee).
D Accident Assist: An advisor can provide
step-by-step guidance following an accident.
D Remote Door Unlock: To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself.
The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle.
Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the
vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge.
D Vehicle Locator Service: To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn
and/or flash the lamps.
D Route Support: An advisor can provide
directions or guidance to most places you want
to go. In addition they can help you locate gas
stations, rest areas, ATM’s, hospitals, hotels, stores,
eateries and more.
D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric
conditions, such as sever weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain;
D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
D Ride Assist: An advisor can locate transportation
Global positioning locating capabilities will not be
available if satellite signals are obstructed.
D Concierge Services: The concierge advisor can
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative
if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
OnStar System Limitations
OnStar is the communication link between you and
existing governmental roadside providers. OnStar will
receive your call and use reasonable effort to contact an
appropriate provider. OnStar cannot promise that the
providers will respond in a timely manner or at all.
in the event that you are unable to drive.
obtain tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip
planning and other unique items or services.
Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber
Services Agreement. In order to provide you with
excellent service, calls with the OnStar Center may
be monitored or recorded.
OnStar service is :
Assist Handle
D available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,
An assist handle above the passenger door can be used
when getting out of your vehicle.
D available when the vehicle is within the operating
Garment Hooks
Hawaii and Canada;
range of a cellular provider;
For your convenience, garment hooks are attached to the
rear trim near the headliner in the vehicle.
2-65
Power Sunroof (Option)
Your vehicle may have an express-open sunroof. It
includes a sliding and tilting glass panel and a sunshade.
The switch for this feature is located on the overhead
console if the vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Information Center (DIC). If the vehicle is not equipped
with a DIC, the sunroof switch is located on the roof
panel headliner.
To open the power
sunroof, press the
switch to the rear
twice and the
power sunroof
will fully open.
DIC Version Shown
The switch works only when the ignition is in ACC or
ON or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
2-66
Open/Express-Open: To activate the express-open
feature, push the switch rearward. You can stop the
power sunroof before it is completely open by pushing
the switch forward.
Vent: Your sunroof also has a vent feature. It can
be activated from the closed sunroof position by
pushing the switch once rearward. To close, push
and hold the sunroof switch forward. When using
this feature the sunshade should be fully opened
in the rearward position.
The sunshade can be opened manually by sliding it
rearward or automatically by opening the power
sunroof. You will need to close the sunshade
manually by sliding it forward.
Close: To close the sunroof, push the switch forward
and hold until the sunroof motor stops, or release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
HomeLink Transmitter R(Option)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Decide which one of the three channels (one of the
three HomeLink buttons) you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink
through Step 3.
3. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink
slowly, (this may take up to 30 seconds), hold the
hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
from HomeLink and then press and hold the
transmitter button on the hand-held transmitter.
Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly
(this may take up to 90 seconds).
2-67
If you have trouble programming HomeLink, make
sure that you have followed the directions exactly as
described and that the battery in the hand-held
transmitter is not weak. If you still cannot program it,
move the hand-held transmitter to the left or right or
forward or backward or flip it upside down. HomeLink
may not work with older garage door openers that do
not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
attempts, refer to “Training a Garage Door Opener
with Rolling Codes” later in this section. or contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in
case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink.
Training a Garage Door Opener with a
“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to HomeLink, see “Programming the
HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have
completed this programming already, you now need to
train the garage door opener motor head unit to
recognize HomeLink.
2-68
1. Find the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit. The exact
location and color will vary by garage door opener
brand. If you have difficulty finding the Learn or
Smart button, refer to your garage door opener
owner’s manual or contact the manufacturer of
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the
internet at www.homelink.com.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful
to have another person assist in programming
the transmitter.
2. Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage door
opener motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to
flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.
3. Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button
three times.
The rolling garage door opener should now recognize
the HomeLink. You may either use HomeLink or the
hand-held transmitter to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515,
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Canadian Programming
Resetting Defaults
Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after two seconds. In this case, you
should press and hold the HomeLink button
(see Steps 2 and 3 under Programming the HomeLink
Transmitter) while you press and repress (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
HomeLink is trained
To reset HomeLInk to default settings, hold down the
two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
Continue to hold the buttons until the HomeLink
indicator light turns off and then release both buttons.
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLInk for
at least a half of a second. the indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Accessories
Accessories for HomeLink are available from the
manufacturer. If you would like additional information
contact the manufacturer at 1-800-355-3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons on HomeLink until the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons.
2-69
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
2-70
The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:
A. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
I. Remote Trunk Release
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
(behind steering wheel)
J. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
L. Cruising Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
D. Instrument Panel Cluster
M. Ignition Switch
E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button
N. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever
F. Audio System
O. Climate Controls
G. Air Vent
P. Glove Box
K. Hood Release
H. Exterior Lamps Control
2-71
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically.
3400 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version shown; Canada similar
2-72
3800 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version shown; Canada similar
2-73
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (kmh).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven in either miles (used in the United States) or in
kilometers (used in Canada).
Your trip odometer tells how far you have driven since
you last reset it.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you
see ERROR, you’ll know someone has probably
tampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, than that will be done.
But if it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
2-74
Your trip/select button will go back and forth between
the odometer and the trip odometer if the button is
pressed and released within 1.5 seconds. If the button
is pressed and held for longer than 1.5 seconds while in
the trip odometer mode, it will be reset to zero. If the
button is pressed and held for longer than 1.5 seconds
while in the odometer mode, it will have no effect.
Your trip odometer will work no matter what position
your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
3800 V6 Engine Shown
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded area, or engine damage may occur.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you
are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-75
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights and
gages. See “Driver Information Center (DIC)” in
the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON, a chime will come on for
about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their
safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for
about 55 seconds.
2-76
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Voltmeter Gage (3800 V6 Engine)
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
You can read battery
voltage on the
voltmeter gage.
If the gage reads less than 12 volts or more than 16 volts
while the engine is running, and it stays there, you may
have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Also, when your gage reads less than 11 volts or
more than 16 volts, your battery life indicator will be
illuminated in the message center. For more information
see “Battery Life Indicator” in the Index.
2-77
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
The LOW BRAKE FLUID message in the message
center will also appear when there is a brake problem.
See “Low Brake Fluid Message” in the Index. Have
your brake system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
2-78
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
The anti-lock brake
system warning light
should come on for
a few seconds when
you turn the ignition
key to ON.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine,
turn the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and
stays on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible
and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system
needs service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System Warning Light
The traction control system
warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
D If you turn the system off by pressing the TRAC OFF
button located on the center console, a chime will
sound and the warning light will come on and stay on.
To turn the system back on, press the button again.
The warning light should go off. See “Traction Control
System” in the Index for more information.
D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control system
will turn off and the warning light will come on. If
your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on until your brakes cool down.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
2-79
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle
is working. During the majority of the operation, the
gage will read 210_F (100_C) or less.
United States - 3400
V6 Engine Cluster
United States - 3800
V6 Engine Cluster
Canada - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
Canada - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
2-80
If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal
for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the
250_F (122_C) mark. When the gage reads greater
than 250_F (122_C), the HOT COOLANT TEMP
light will be illuminated in the message center and a
chime will sound continuously. If the gage reaches the
260_F (125_C) mark, it indicates that the cooling
system is working beyond its capacity.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to
come on. Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-81
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-82
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts
of air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire.
The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct
this condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly.
See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a few
driving trips to turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-83
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Oil Pressure Indicator/Low Oil
Pressure Message
The oil pressure
indicator tells you
if you have the
correct oil pressure in
your engine to operate
your vehicle.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This can
happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if
your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days of
routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
2-84
3800 V6 Engine
Under normal conditions the indicator should read
slightly above the half way point between the low L
and high H settings.
If your oil pressure falls too low, the indicator will read
at the low setting in the red zone. The LOW OIL
PRESSURE message will be illuminated in the message
center, also. If this occurs, you should have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
United States
Canada
This message is displayed in the message center
when the engine oil pressure is low. A chime will
sound continuously, also.
If this occurs, you should have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
Cruise Light (If Equipped)
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
2-85
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
Fuel Gage
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Here are three situations you may experience with
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with
the fuel gage.
D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
United States - 3400
V6 Engine Cluster
United States - 3800
V6 Engine Cluster
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
D The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or accelerating.
Canada - 3400 V6
Engine Cluster
2-86
Canada - 3800 V6
Engine Cluster
Message Center
The message center is located below the tachometer
gage on the instrument panel cluster. It gives you
important safety and maintenance facts.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you that
your traction control system is not working properly.
Be sure to have your vehicle serviced right away.
Traction Active
Modes
Service Traction System
United States
United States
Canada
If this message appears when you are driving, there is
a problem with your traction control system and your
vehicle is in need of service.
Canada
This message will appear when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin.
The message will stay on a few seconds after the
traction system stops limiting wheel spin.
When this message is displayed, the system will not
limit wheel spin. The message will stay on for 60
seconds and then go out. Four chimes will also be heard.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
2-87
Hot Coolant Temperature
Battery Life Indicator
When the vehicle is
started this message
will be displayed for
three seconds.
United States
If the message is displayed when the engine is running,
you may have a problem with your charging system. If
there is a problem with the charging system, four chimes
will sound when the message comes on. The battery
display will also stay on while the key is in ON until the
engine is started.
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this message on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories.
2-88
Canada
This message is displayed when the cooling
system temperature gets hot. A chime will sound
continuously, also.
Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant
level. See “Engine Coolant,” “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” and “Engine Overheating” in
the Index for further information.
Low Coolant Level
United States
Low Oil Pressure
Canada
This message is displayed when the cooling system is
low on coolant. Four chimes will also sound.
The engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when the engine oil pressure
is low. A chime will sound continuously, also. See “Oil
Pressure Indicator/Low Oil Pressure Light” earlier in
this section.
2-89
Low Engine Oil Level
United States
Change Engine Oil
Canada
United States
Canada
This message is displayed for 60 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle when the engine oil level is low.
Four chimes will also sound.
This message is displayed when the engine oil
needs to be changed. It will appear for 60 seconds.
After 60 seconds, it will go out.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you that
your engine oil level is low. Be sure to have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message must be reset. Until it is reset,
the message will be displayed for 60 seconds each time
you start the engine. For more information on resetting
the system, see “Engine Oil, When to Change” in
the Index.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index on how to check the oil
level and for what type of oil to add.
2-90
Door Ajar
United States
Security
Canada
This message will appear if the driver’s door or the
passenger’s door is not completely closed and the
ignition is in ON.
If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you
will also hear four chimes.
United States
Canada
This message is displayed to monitor the
PasslockR system.
If the security message is displayed continuously while
driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the
Passlock system. Your vehicle will not be protected by
Passlock, and you should see your dealer for service.
2-91
Low Fuel
United States
Low Brake Fluid
Canada
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on
fuel. Four chimes will also sound.
Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
2-92
United States
Canada
This message will be displayed when your vehicle has a
brake problem. The brake system warning light will also
be illuminated.
If this message appears, the brakes aren’t working
properly. You should have your vehicle serviced
immediately. See “Brake System Warning Light”
in the Index for more information.
Low Washer Fluid
United States
Low Tire Pressure
Canada
United States
Canada
This message is displayed when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid.
The low tire pressure system monitors the inflation
pressure of the tires.
The message is only displayed for 60 seconds at the
start of each ignition cycle. For more information see,
“Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index.
After the system has learned tire pressure with properly
inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will
be displayed and four warning chimes will sound if the
pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi (83 kPa) lower than
the other three tires.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you that
your washer fluid is low. Be sure to refill the washer
fluid tank right away.
When you have checked the tire pressures, be sure to
reset the tire inflation monitor. See “Tires” in the Index.
2-93
Service Vehicle Soon
United States
Trunk Open
Canada
This message will come on if you have engine problems.
These problems may not be obvious and may not
affect vehicle performance or durability. Consult a
qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain
top vehicle performance.
This message may also appear if there are electrical
problems with the trunk release sensor. See “Trunk
Release Sensor” in the Index for more information.
2-94
United States
Canada
This message will appear if the trunk is not completely
closed and the ignition is in ON.
If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you will
also hear four chimes.
If this message flashes for one minute after the ignition
is turned on, the trunk release sensor is turned off.
See “Trunk Release Sensor” in the Index for
more information.
Highbeam Out
United States
Driver Information Center
(DIC) (Option)
Canada
If this message appears, you may have a problem with
your high-beam headlamps.
The message will stay on approximately 60 seconds.
When the ignition is turned off, this message will be
displayed again for three seconds to remind you that you
may have a problem with your highbeam-headlamps.
Be sure to check your bulbs right away and replace them
if necessary.
See “Bulb Replacement” in the Index.
Optional Sunroof version shown
The DIC will show information about the vehicle and
the surroundings. It is located in the headliner between
the sun visors.
2-95
RESET
MODE
You can set the AVG ECON, FUEL USED or AVG
SPEED trip computer modes by pressing and holding
this button for three seconds while you are in the mode
you wish to reset. A chime will sound to confirm that
your requested change has been made, and all the
segments of the display will briefly light up.
Press this button to cycle through three modes of
operation -- Off, Compass/Temperature and Trip
Computer mode.
To change the display to a metric or English reading,
press the RESET and MODE buttons at the same
time. Hold them down for three seconds, and the
display will change. A chime will be heard to confirm
the new selection.
The reset button can also be used to manually calibrate
the compass. See “Manual Compass Calibration”
The reset button can be used to set the compass zone
variation. See “Compass Variance”
2-96
D OFF: No driver information is displayed in this
mode of operation.
D Compass/Temperature Mode: One of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature are
displayed. If the temperature is below 38_F (3_C),
the word ICE.
D Trip Computer: Pressing the MODE button cycles
through the five displays. Press the MODE button
after the last Trip Computer display to return the
DIC to the OFF mode.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough to cause the
compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the
compass variance must be set.
Setting the Variance
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET
button for approximately five seconds. The last
entered variance zone number and VAR will be
displayed. Press the MODE button until the proper
variance number on the map is shown. Press the
RESET button to set the new variance zone and
resume normal operation.
All the display segments will be illuminated briefly
to acknowledge the change in zone number. A chime
will sound to confirm that the new zone number has
been set.
2-97
Automatic Compass Calibration
Manual Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the calibration process may not be complete. In
these cases CAL will be displayed, and all segments of
the compass will be illuminated where the compass
reading is normally displayed.
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the
compass into the calibration mode.
All Segments Illuminated
To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large
metal objects, make one or two 360_ turns.
The calibration symbol will turn off and the compass
reading will be displayed.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
Compass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET button
for at least 10 seconds until the calibration symbol
appears and all segments of the compass display are
illuminated. A chime will sound to confirm that the
calibration mode is active. Release the button and
complete two or three 360_ turns in an area free from
large metal objects. The calibration symbol will turn off
and the compass reading will be displayed. A chime will
sound to verify that the calibration is complete.
Error Displays
D An error of the speed sensor or fuel sender will
cause -E- to be displayed.
D In the absence of vehicle communications,
a dash (--) is displayed.
If one of these error messages appear, see your dealer.
2-98
Trip Computer
Resetting the Trip Computer
There are five trip computer displays which may be
stepped through by pushing the MODE button. The
information will appear in the following order:
Press and hold the RESET button for at least
three seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the
display showing all segments on briefly and a chime.
A reset can only be done in AVG ECON, FUEL
USED and AVG SPEED displays. Each setting
must be reset individually.
D AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows
the average fuel economy since the last reset.
D INST ECON (Instantaneous Fuel Economy):
This shows fuel economy for the most recent second
of driving.
D RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimated
distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.
The fuel economy used to calculate range is based on
the last few hours of driving. When in a low fuel
condition, LO is displayed.
D FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows the
accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
D AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows the
average speed since the last reset.
2-99
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-16
Comfort Controls
Dual ComforTemp Climate Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic
Tone Control (If Equipped)
t
3-23
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-37
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Backglass Antenna
Vehicle Customization Settings
Chime Level Adjustment
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
Dual ComforTemp
t Climate Controls
OFF: Turn the fan knob to OFF to turn off the system.
The fan must be on for the air conditioning compressor
to operate.
Driver’s Temperature Lever
The lever on the left adjusts the air temperature on
the driver’s side of the vehicle independent of the
temperature set by the passenger. Slide the lever
upward to raise the temperature. Slide the lever
downward to lower the temperature.
Passenger’s Temperature Lever
The Dual ComforTemp Climate Control system allows
the driver and passenger to maintain separate temperature
settings for their seating areas. The system works best if
you keep your windows closed while using it.
The lever on the right adjusts the air temperature on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle independent of the
temperature set by the driver. Slide the lever upward to
raise the temperature. Slide the lever downward to
lower the temperature.
Mode Knob
Fan Knob
The knob on the right side of the control panel has
several settings to control the direction of airflow:
The knob on the left side of the climate control panel
regulates the fan speed. Turn the fan to 1 for low fan
speed and up to 5 for maximum fan speed.
(Vent): This setting directs air through the
instrument panel outlets.
3-2
(Bi-Level): This setting directs air two ways.
Half of the air is directed through the instrument panel
outlets. Most of the remaining air is directed through the
floor vents and a small amount to the windshield
defroster and side window outlets.
(Floor): This setting sends most of the air through
the ducts near the floor. The remaining air comes out of
the defroster and side window outlets. The recirculation
button cannot be selected in this mode.
(Defogger): This setting sends half of the air to
the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window
outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40_F (4_C). The air inlet will also
be automatically set to outside air. The recirculation
button cannot be selected in this mode.
(Defroster): This setting directs most of the air
through the defroster and side window vents. Some of
the air also goes to the floor ducts. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting unless
the outside temperature is below 40_F (4_C). The air
inlet will also be automatically set to outside air. The
recirculation button cannot be selected in this mode.
Mode Buttons
(Outside Air): Press this button to force the
system to use outside air. This button is usable in all of
the air delivery modes on the right knob. An indicator
on the button will light up when this button is selected.
(Recirculation): Press this button to limit
the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This
is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering
your vehicle or when you are trying to cool your vehicle
quickly with air conditioning. This button can be used
in vent and bi-level modes. An indictor on the button
will light up when this button is selected. The system
will default back to the outside air setting, so you will
have to reselect this setting every time you restart
your vehicle.
While in the recirculation mode the system may cause
fogging of the windows when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defogger or
defroster mode and increase the fan speed. To avoid
refogging of the windows, use the outside air setting.
3-3
A/C (Air Conditioning Compressor): Press this
button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and
off. An indicator light will glow on this button when the
air conditioning compressor is turned on. The system
will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle when
the A/C light and fan are on.
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for the
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
For quick cool-down on very hot days, select a fan setting,
turn the right knob on the control panel to vent mode,
press the air conditioning compressor and recirculation
buttons, and move the temperature control all the way in
the blue area. If this setting is used for long periods of
time, the air in your vehicle may become too dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, turn the right knob on
the control panel to vent mode; press the air conditioning
compressor and the outside air buttons, and move the
temperature controls all the way in the blue area.
The system will bring in outside air and cool it.
3-4
On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
To remedy this, turn the right knob on the control panel
to bi-level mode. Press the air conditioning compressor
button and move the temperature controls to a
comfortable setting.
Heating
On cold days, turn the right knob on the control panel to floor
mode. Press the outside air button and move the temperature
controls all the way in the red area. The system will bring in
outside air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts.
Ventilation
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, turn the right knob on the control panel
to vent mode, press the outside air button, and move the
temperature controls to a comfortable setting. Your vehicle
also has the flow-through ventilation system described
later in this section.
Defogging and Defrosting
Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side
windows. To defrost the windows quickly, turn the fan to the
highest setting, and use defroster with the temperature
indicator(s) all the way in the red area. To warm passengers
while keeping the windows clear, use defogger. For more
information, see “Recirculation” in the Index.
Rear Window Defogger
Press the button marked
REAR to turn the rear
window defogger on.
An indicator light will
glow when the rear window
defogger button is on.
Press the button again to
turn it off.
If in use, the system will shut off when the ignition is
turned off.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Don’t put decals there because you might have to
scrape them off.
When turned on, the rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
If your vehicle has the heated outside rearview mirrors,
they will also heat to clear the mirrors surfaces. The
system will automatically turn off after running for
about 15 minutes. If you press the rear window
defogger button again, the system will stay on for
about seven and one half minutes before turning
off again.
3-5
Ventilation Tips
Ventilation System
Adjust the amount of
airflow by moving the
thumbwheel located
underneath or on the sides
of the air vents. Change the
airflow direction by moving
the thumbwheel below the
vents to the right or left.
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
mode knob to floor and the fan to the highest speed
for a few seconds before driving off. This helps clear
the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning
compressor is running and the outside air button
is pressed.
If the airflow seems very low when the fan is adjusted to
the highest setting, regardless of the mode setting, your
passenger compartment air filter may need to be
replaced. See “Maintenance Schedule” and “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
3-6
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold the HR or MN buttons, located below the
tune knob, for two seconds. Then press and hold HR
until the correct hour appears. AM or PM will appear on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or
off. The clock symbol will appear on the display in
time-set mode.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and
Automatic Tone Control
To set the clock to the time of an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information,
press and hold HR and MN at the same time for two
seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol appear
on the display. If the time is not available from the
station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display instead.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to increase
volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
3-7
DISP (Display): Pressing this knob will display the
station being played or it will display the clock. Clock
display is available with the ignition turned off.
A PSCAN "(Preset Scan): Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds and the radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again to
stop scanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever the
tuner is in the preset scan mode. The channel number
(P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. In
FM mode, this function will scan through the current
band such as FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan preset
stations with a strong signal only. The sound will mute
while scanning.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. Each higher volume setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use
automatic volume, select OFF.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
A SEEK ": Press the right arrow to seek to the next or
previous station and stay there. The radio will seek to
stations with a strong signal only. The sound will mute
while seeking.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you are
listening to.
3-8
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will switch to one of these program types.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until the display
goes blank.
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Then turn
the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one
beep and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to
move the sound to the rear speakers.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL. The bass and treble will be
adjusted to the middle position.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob
clockwise to move the sound to the right speakers and
counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it
until you hear one beep. The balance and fade will be
adjusted to the middle position and the display will
show the speaker balance.
3-9
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.
D
6
(Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce
background noise. NR ON will appear on the display.
Press it again to turn Dolby off. NR OFF will appear on
the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. RDS displays program information and can control
your radio. With RDS, the radio can do the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
3-10
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features on
your radio rely on receiving specific RDS information
from these stations. These features will only work when
the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name will appear on the display, instead of the
frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station
name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for
their current programming. Some stations also provide
the name of the current program.
Finding RDS Stations
To find an RDS station perform the following steps:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST knob to display the program type list.
2. Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise
to select a program type. The list is alphabetical. If
you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the
first PTY available.
3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this knob will
also display an RDS station frequency or program type
when the radio is on. The display options are station
name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the
program (if available). Pressing and holding this knob
will activate the RDS default display.
Finding a PTY Preset Stations
P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program
Type (PTY) you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
Press the SEEK TYPE button and the radio will seek to
the first RDS broadcaster of the selected program type.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to the
last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with
the same program type. Press and hold BAND for
two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will
appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other
stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
3-11
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape is
playing. If the cassette tape player is playing, play
will stop for the announcement and resume when
the announcement is finished.
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. These text messages are from the RDS
broadcaster to the listening public and may be general
information such as artist and song title, call in phone
numbers, etc. Press this button to see the message. If the
whole message does not appear on the display, parts of
the message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. To scroll through the message at
your own speed, press the INFO button again for less
3-12
than one second. A new group of words will appear on
the display. Once the complete message has been
displayed, the information symbol will disappear from
the display until another new message is received. The
old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to. When a message is not available
from an FM station, NO INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current station does not broadcast
traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station
that does. The traffic symbol will flash on the display.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a cassette tape or FM radio by enabling the traffic
interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to seek
to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt
feature if the current station does not. The traffic symbol
will flash on the display when seeking for a station that
supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt
feature is on, the traffic symbol will appear on
the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
radio station, you will hear it, even if the volume is
muted or a cassette tape is playing. The traffic symbol
and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the
traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape player
was being used, the tape will stay in the player and
resume play at the point where it stopped.
the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove
the tape and start over. If you want to insert a tape when
the ignition is off, first press EJT or DISP.
Radio Messages
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on and the radio is off,
the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound,
While the tape is playing, use VOL, TUNE, SEEK and
PSCAN controls just as you do for the radio. The radio
will display TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous selection on the tape if the selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If this pushbutton is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection. If this pushbutton is pressed and the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or the
beginning of the current selection, depending upon the
position on the tape. SEEK and a -1 will appear on the
display while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or held, the
radio will go to the displayed number of previous
selections up to 9. SEEK and a negative number will
appear on the display. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-13
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
selection on the tape. If you press this pushbutton more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the tape. SEEK and a positive number will
appear on the display. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for next to
work. To forward through each selection press the right
SEEK arrow. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play the last selected station while the
tape reverses. The station frequency and REV will
appear on the display. You may select stations during
reverse operation by using TUNE and the SEEK arrows.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press the pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the
last selected station while the tape advances. The station
frequency and FWD will appear on the display. You
may select stations during forward operation by using
TUNE and the SEEK arrows.
5 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
3-14
D
6
(Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce
background noise. The double-D symbol will appear
on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
A SEEK ": If the right or left arrow is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
forward or backward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive or negative number will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain
in the player.
TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a cassette tape when listening to the radio. The
inactive tape will remain safely inside the radio for
future listening.
EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a tape when it
is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may
be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open
end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display for five
seconds, indicating the feature is active.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power
up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJT
is pressed.
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-15
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. Each higher volume setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use
automatic volume, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Press this knob when the ignition is
off to display the clock.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
A VOL " (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise
to increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume.
A TUNE ": Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to
the next or previous station and stay there. The radio
will seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound
will mute while seeking.
3-16
A PSCAN " (Preset Scan): Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds and the radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds and flash the station frequency, then go on to
the next preset station. Press one of the arrows or one of
the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. SCAN will be
displayed whenever the tuner is in the preset scan mode.
The channel number (P1 through P6) will appear with
the frequency. In FM mode, this function will scan
through the current band such as FM1 or FM2. The
radio will scan preset stations with a strong signal only.
The sound will mute while scanning.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you are
listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease.
The display will show the bass or treble level. If a
station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the
treble.
To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one
beep and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. You will hear one beep
and the radio will display ALL. The bass and treble will
be adjusted to the middle position.
3-17
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose
preset bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will switch to one of these program types.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until the display
goes blank.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to
move the sound to the right speakers and
counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers.
To adjust the fade, push and release the AUDIO
knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the
knob clockwise to move the sound to the front
speakers and counterclockwise to move the sound
to the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it
until you hear one beep. The balance and fade will be
adjusted to the middle position and the display will
show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. You can use RDS to display program information
and to control your radio. With RDS your radio can do
the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
3-18
RDS features are only available on FM stations which
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your
radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from
these stations. These features will only work when the
RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name will appear on the display, instead of the
frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station
name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for
their current programming. Some stations also provide
the name of the current program.
Finding RDS Stations
To find RDS stations, perform the following steps:
1. Press the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST knob to display the program type list.
2. Turn the knob either clockwise or counterclockwise
to select a program type. The list is alphabetical. If
you select ANY TYPE your radio will seek to the
first PTY available.
3. Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this knob will
also display an RDS station frequency or program type
when the radio is on. The display options are station
name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the
program (if available). Pressing and holding this knob
will activate the RDS default display.
Finding a PTY Preset Station
P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program
Type (PTY) you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and
the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the
selected program type. If the radio cannot find the desired
program type, NONE will appear on the display and the
radio will return to the last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to
turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When
you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate
frequency feature will automatically be turned on.
3-19
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press TYPE a second time to seek. If a station with the
selected PTY is not found, the radio will return to the
original station and display NONE.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is
playing. If the compact disc player is playing, play
will stop for the announcement and resume when the
announcement is finished.
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
3-20
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. These text messages are from the RDS
broadcaster to the listening public and may be general
information such as artist and song title, call in phone
numbers, etc. Press this button to see the message. If the
whole message does not appear on the display, parts of
the message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. To scroll through the message at
your own speed, press the INFO button again for less
than one second. A new group of words will appear on
the display. Once the complete message has been
displayed, the information symbol will disappear from
the display until another new message is received. The
old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to. When a message is not available
from an FM station, NO INFO will be displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current station does not broadcast
traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station
that does. The traffic symbol will flash on the display.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a CD or FM station by enabling the traffic interrupt
feature. Press the TRAF button once to seek to an RDS
station that supports the traffic interrupt feature if the
current station does not. The traffic symbol will flash on
the display when seeking for a station that supports
traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt feature is on,
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
compact disc is playing. The traffic symbol and
TRAFFIC will appear on the display while the traffic
announcement plays. If the compact disc player was
being used, the compact disc will stay in the player and
resume play at the point where it stopped.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
DISP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
3-21
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing for
less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and
the current track has been playing for more than eight
seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving back through the
disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal
playing speed. Release it to play the track. The display
will show ET and the elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed.
3-22
Press and hold it for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release
it to play the track. The display will show ET and the
elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
ON will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track starts
to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play. RDM
OFF will appear on the display.
A SEEK ": Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current or previous track. Press the right arrow to go to
the start of the next track. If either of the arrows is held
or pressed more then once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in
the player.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
EJT (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it
is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
System (RDS) and Automatic Tone Control
(If Equipped)
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
D If you’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth the disc should play.
D If it’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
D If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
A VOL " (Volume): Turn the knob clockwise to
increase volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease
volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
3-23
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. The volume level should always sound the
same to you as you drive. Each higher volume setting
allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any speed.
NONE will appear on the display if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want to use
automatic volume, select OFF.
DISP (Display): Pressing this knob will display the
clock. Clock display is available with the ignition turned
on or off. Press this knob to display an RDS station
frequency or program type when the radio is on.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
A TUNE ": Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
A SEEK ": Press the right or left arrow to seek to
the next or previous station and stay there. The radio
will seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound
will mute while seeking.
3-24
A PSCAN " (Preset Scan): Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan through each of
the preset stations stored on your pushbuttons, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press one of the arrows or one of the pushbuttons again
to stop scanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever the
tuner is in the preset scan mode. The channel number
(P1 through P6) will appear with the frequency. In FM
mode, this function will scan through the current band
such as FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan preset stations
with a strong signal only. The sound will mute while
scanning.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you are
listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons.
The radio will produce one beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station you set
will return and the bass and treble equalization that
you selected will also be automatically selected for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS or TREB appears on the display. Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one
beep and adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic): This feature allows
you to choose bass and treble equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop,
rock and classical stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will change to one of the preset equalization
settings previously listed.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL
is displayed.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob
until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob
clockwise to move the sound to the right speakers and
counterclockwise to move the sound to the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob clockwise to move the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise to
move the sound to the rear speakers.
3-25
The middle position balances the sound between the
speakers. To adjust the balance and fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in the
middle position.
Using RDS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS is a system that receives data along
with the audio of the FM station you are currently tuned
to. You can use RDS to display program information
and to control your radio. With RDS, the radio can do
the following:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
3-26
RDS features are only available on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your
radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from
these stations. These features will only work when the
RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio
station may broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name will appear on the display, instead of the
frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station
name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY)
for their current programming. Some stations also
provide the name of the current program.
Finding RDS Stations
To find RDS stations perform the following steps:
1. Push the SEEK TYPE button or turn the P-TYPE
LIST knob to display the program type list.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob either clockwise or
counterclockwise to select a program type. The list is
alphabetical. If you select ANY TYPE your radio
will seek to the first PTY available.
3. Push the SEEK TYPE button to activate search.
A VOL " (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to
increase volume when RDS interrupts regular play. Turn
it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. Pressing this knob will
also display an RDS station frequency or program type
when the radio is on. The display options are station
name, station frequency, PTY and the name of the
program (if available). Pressing and holding this knob
will activate the RDS default display.
Finding a PTY Station
P-TYPE LIST (Program Type): Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the Program
Type (PTY) you want to listen to. TYPE and a PTY will
appear on the display. Press the SEEK TYPE button and
the radio will seek to the first RDS broadcaster of the
selected program type. If the radio cannot find the
desired program type, NONE will appear on the display
and the radio will return to the last station you were
listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear
on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations.
Press and hold BAND again for two seconds to turn
alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations. When
you turn the ignition off and then on again, the alternate
frequency feature will automatically be turned on.
SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station with
the last selected PTY; TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display, if it is not already showing.
Press SEEK TYPE a second time to seek. If a station
with the selected PTY is not found, the radio will return
to the original station and display NONE.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of national or local emergencies.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! appears on the display when an alert
announcement plays. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, you will hear it, even
if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc
is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
3-27
This function will only work during actual emergency
broadcasts, and will not work during tests of the
emergency broadcast system. This feature is not
supported by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. These text messages are from the RDS
broadcaster to the listening public and may be general
information such as artist and song title, call in phone
numbers, etc. Press this button to see the message. If the
whole message does not appear on the display, parts of
the message will appear every three seconds until the
message is completed. To scroll through the message at
your own speed, press the INFO button again for less
than one second. A new group of words will appear on
the display. Once the complete message has been
displayed, the information symbol will disappear from
the display until another new message is received. The
old message can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to. When a message is not available
from an FM station, NO INFO will be displayed.
3-28
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current station does not broadcast
traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station
that does. The traffic symbol will flash on the display.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
Your radio can be programmed to interrupt the playback
of a cassette tape, CD or FM radio by enabling the
traffic interrupt feature. Press the TRAF button once to
seek to an RDS station that supports the traffic interrupt
feature if the current station does not. The traffic symbol
will flash on the display when seeking for a station that
supports traffic interrupt. When the traffic interrupt
feature is on, TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a
cassette tape or compact disc is playing. The traffic
symbol and TRAFFIC will appear on the display while
the traffic announcement plays. If the cassette tape or
compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact
disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCKR system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this
player. The longer side with the tape visible should face
to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the
tape can be inserted and will begin playing. A tape
symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape is
inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the
tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove the
tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off,
first press EJT or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous selection on the tape if the selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If this pushbutton is
pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
current selection. If this pushbutton is pressed and the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. SEEK and a -1 will appear on
the display while the cassette player is in the previous
mode. If this pushbutton is pressed additional times or
held, the radio will go to the displayed number of
previous selections up to 9. SEEK and a negative
number will appear on the display. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for previous to work. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-29
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next
selection on the tape. If you press the pushbutton
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the tape. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display. Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for next
to work. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play the last selected station while the
tape reverses. The station frequency and REV will
appear on the display. You may select stations during
reverse operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly to another part of the tape. Press this pushbutton
again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the
last selected station while the tape advances. The station
frequency and FWD will appear on the display. You
may select stations during forward operation by using
TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN.
5 (Side): Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
6
(Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce
background noise. NR ON will appear on the display.
Press it again to turn Dolby B off. NR OFF will appear
on the display.
D
3-30
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
A SEEK ": The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward or backward through the tape. SEEK and a
positive or negative number will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain
in the player.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between
the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The
inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right
of the cassette tape slot, to stop a tape when it is playing
or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may be
activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one of
the following errors.
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after disabling the
tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player.
D The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
To disable the feature, use the following steps:
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
1. Turn the radio off.
2. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio will
display READY and flash the cassette icon.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power
up the radio and begin playing.
D The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
D The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
This override routine will remain active until EJT
is pressed.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.
The display will show the CD symbol. If you want to
insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
DISP or EJT.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
Playing a Compact Disc
3-31
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing for
less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and
the current track has been playing for more than eight
seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving back through the
disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal
playing speed. Release it to play the passage. The
display will show ET and the elapsed time.
3-32
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
ON will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track starts
to play. Press it again to turn off random play. RDM
OFF will appear on the display.
A SEEK ": The right arrow is the same as the NEXT
pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the PREV
pushbutton. If either of the SEEK arrows is held or
pressed more then once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold this
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a CD when
listening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between
the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The
inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio
for future listening.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the
right of the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may
be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is
pressed first.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning a
portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not
operate and LOC will be displayed.
When the ignition is off and RAP is not active, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed.
Y SEEK B: Press the up or down arrow to seek to the
next or previous radio station.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player
will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the
down arrow. Holding SEEK for three seconds or more
will activate the PSCAN mode.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not
operate if stolen.
3-33
SEEK by TYPE: Press this button to go to a station
with the last selected PTY TYPE and the last selected
PTY will appear on the display, if it is not already
showing. If a station with the selected PTY is not
found, the radio will return to the original station. If
both SEEK by TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with traffic announcements and the
selected PTY.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
PRESET: Press this button to play a station you have
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
FM Stereo
MODE: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, it will stop
and the radio will play.
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
Y VOL B: Press the up or down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
3-34
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following:
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
2. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Electronics radio
or other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that you have used your tape player for 50
hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this
message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to
see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other
cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the
tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-35
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut tape
detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a
broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being
ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD or the TAPE AUX
button for five seconds. READY will appear on
the display and a cassette symbol will flash for
five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-36
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Backglass Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear
window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure
that the inside surface of the rear window is not
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure
that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. There is enough space between the lines to
attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
Vehicle Customization Settings
Your audio system can be used to control vehicle
customization settings using the DISP button when the
radio is off. See “Vehicle Customization Settings” in the
Index for more information.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. The chime is
produced from the driver’s side front door speakers. To
change the volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with
the ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will be displayed on the radio. To change back to
the default or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton
6 again. The chime level will change from the loud level
to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed. Each time the
chime volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
will disable vehicle chimes.
3-37
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-16
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Traction Control System
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4-18
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-26
4-29
4-31
4-33
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water than
men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means
that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level
than a man of her same body weight when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the
driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse
at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or
even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle. Also see “Traction Control System” in
the Index.
4-6
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake
pressure faster than any driver could. The computer
is programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Traction Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control System
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transaxle and apply the front brakes to limit wheel spin.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
United States
Canada
This light will come on when your Traction Control
System is limiting wheel spin. See “Traction Control
System Active Light” in the Index.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
4-9
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”
in the Index.
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only when
necessary. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
When the system is on,
this warning light will
come on to let you know
if there’s a problem.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Traction
Control System on. But you can turn the system
off if you ever need to.
4-10
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To turn the system
on or off, press the
TRAC OFF button
on the console.
When you turn the system off, a chime will sound and
the Traction Control System warning light will come on
and stay on. If the Traction Control System is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button to turn the system
off, the warning light will come on and the system will
turn off right away.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The Traction Control System warning
light should go off.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to
do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
4-13
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-14
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for
the following driver to get ahead of you.
Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on
slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be
longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
4-16
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make
a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll
get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower
and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank
filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
4-18
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
4-19
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could
drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and
otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth. See “Tires”
in the Index.
4-20
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-21
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
4-22
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
The exit speed is usually posted.
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a
day’s work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and
shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at
the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let
it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-24
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-25
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-26
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed,
blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-27
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-28
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle -- such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-29
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
D What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
D How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
D Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your
dealer or trailering professional for additional advice
and equipment recommendations.
D Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to
make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See
“Before Leaving on a Long Trip” in the Index.
Dinghy Towing
NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” in the Index
for more information.
4-30
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position.
5. Release the parking brake.
Loading Your Vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
is on the inside of the trunk lid. The label tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight you can
carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
4-31
If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if
there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
4-32
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
4-33
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-34
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue
(A) should weigh 10-15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, located on the inside
of the trunk lid, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
4-35
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index.
Dirt and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes
so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
4-36
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond
the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
4-37
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or
other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers.
Signal well in advance.
4-38
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need
additional wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows
on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal
a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about
to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If you have overdrive, you may want to drive in THIRD (3),
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)G.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
4-39
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D start your engine,
D shift into a gear, and
D release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review this information before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
4-40
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-10
5-10
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-13
5-23
5-24
5-35
5-36
Cooling System
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher
button is located to the right
of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear
or light yellow. Replace the battery when there
is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-3
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle
in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL
before setting the parking brake.
5-4
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
terminal for that purpose. The terminal is located in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle, underneath the diagonal cross brace.
CAUTION:
To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, lift the
plastic cap. You should always use the remote
positive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+)
terminal on the battery.
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-5
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-), or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts, too. And don’t connect the negative (-)
cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
5-6
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location of the vehicle with the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal location on the
vehicle with the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the
black negative (-)
cable to the
negative (-) terminal
location of the good
battery. Use a
remote negative (-)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part or to a remote negative (-) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
5-7
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
NOTICE:
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
5-8
Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take
care that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-9
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
“Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If you want to
tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational
purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a warning
message about a hot engine on your instrument panel
cluster. See “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and
“Hot Coolant Temperature Message” in the Index.
You also have a low coolant message on your instrument
panel cluster. See “Low Coolant Level Message” in
the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists, an overheat protection
mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a
significant loss in power and engine performance. The low
coolant light may come on and the temperature gage will
indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving extended
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-10
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
5-11
NOTICE:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message
can indicate a serious problem. See “Low Coolant
Message” in the Index.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
5-12
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously
in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
3800 V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
3400 V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
CAUTION:
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-13
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark
on the coolant recovery tank. To check the coolant level,
look for the COLD mark on the side of the coolant
recovery tank that faces the engine. Check to make sure
that the coolant level is up to the COLD fill level on the
side of the coolant recovery tank. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5-14
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine coolant at
the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-15
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
The coolant recovery tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on location.
5-16
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
5-17
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
NOTICE:
Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure could cause your
engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle, near the diagonal cross brace. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-18
3. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, remove the
3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access
the bleed valve.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
A. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and
cap before removing. Twist the oil fill tube, with
cap attached, counterclockwise and remove it.
B. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide the
catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove
the cover shield.
C. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the valve
cover oil fill hole until you’re ready to replace the
cover shield.
5-19
4. After the engine
cools, open the
coolant air bleed
valve or valves.
3400 V6 Bleed
Valve #1
3400 V6 Bleed
Valve #2
3800 V6 Bleed Valve
3400 V6 engine: There are two bleed valves.
One is located on the thermostat housing.
The other is located on the thermostat bypass tube.
3800 V6 engine: There is one bleed valve.
It is located on the thermostat housing.
5-20
6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, replace the
3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.
A. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,
from the valve cover.
B. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under
the bracket on the engine.
C. Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole
in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and cap by
twisting clockwise.
5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See
“Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information
about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valves after the radiator is filled.
5-21
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
COLD mark.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-22
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant
mixture through the filler neck until the level
reaches the base of the filler neck.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level
in the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT
mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark
when the engine is cold.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-23
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-24
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
The steps for removing the compact spare tire and
installing it on the vehicle are:
1. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare tire
cover counterclockwise
to remove it. Then
remove the cover.
2. Remove the compact spare tire. See “Compact Spare
Tire” later in this section for more information about
the compact spare tire.
5-25
3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
5-26
4. The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A)
extension and protector/guide (B) and wheel
wrench (C).
Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel
Nut Caps
Wheel Cover Caps
Your vehicle may have
center caps if equipped
with aluminum wheels.
To remove a center cap use
the wrench to pry gently at
the notch. Don’t use a tool
that is narrower than the
wrench to pry at this notch.
Wheel Covers
If your vehicle is equipped
with wheel covers, loosen
the plastic nut caps with the
wheel wrench. If needed,
you can finish loosening
them with your fingers.
Then, using the flat end
of the wheel wrench,
pry along the edge of the
cover until it comes off.
5-27
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
5-28
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
Jack placement for a front tire
Jack placement for a rear tire
The diagram shows you where you should place
your jack to change a front tire. Use the bolts (A) as
a guide when positioning the jack lift head (C) near
the rear edge of the front wheel opening (B).
The diagram shows you where to place your jack to
change a rear tire. Use the notch (B) as a guide when
positioning the jack lift head (A) near the front edge
of the rear wheel opening (C).
For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put jack
lift head about 7.5 inches (19 cm) from the rear edge
of the front wheel opening in the cutout of the rocker
panel molding.
For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the jack
lift head about 4 inches (10 cm) from the front edge
of the rear wheel opening in the cutout of the rocker
panel molding.
Put the compact spare tire near you.
Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-29
3. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
2. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well of the vehicle. Remove all wheel nuts
and take off the flat tire.
5-30
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
4. Install the compact spare tire.
5. Reinstall the wheel nuts
with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-31
7. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
5-32
Don’t try to put the wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover and
wheel center cap, if applicable, in the trunk until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the
following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension and
protector/guide located in the foam holder to help
prevent wheel surface damage.
To store a full-size tire do the following:
1. Place the tire in the trunk, valve stem facing down
with the protector/guide through a wheel bolt hole.
2. Remove the protector/guide and attach the
retainer securely. The cover will not fit over a
full-size tire, so be sure to store the cover as far
forward as possible.
5-33
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
A. Retainer
B. Cover
CAUTION:
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Nut
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index.
To properly store the compact spare tire do
the following:
1. When you put the compact spare tire back in
the trunk, place the protector/guide back in the
foam holder.
2. Put the cover back over the compact spare tire
and tighten the center nut.
5-34
E. Jack
F. Wrench
G. Lock Nut Tool
H. Foam Holder
I. Extension and
Protective Guide
J. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. You must calibrate
the tire inflation monitor system after installing or
removing the compact spare. See “Tire Inflation
Monitor” in the Index. The system may not work
correctly when the compact spare is installed on the
vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a
full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last
longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-35
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-36
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn the system off.
See “Traction Control System” in the Index. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in
gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after
a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do
need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-8
6-8
6-12
6-19
6-21
6-22
6-26
6-30
6-30
6-31
6-33
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
6-36
6-37
6-41
6-42
6-52
6-53
6-55
6-56
6-59
6-60
6-61
6-61
6-62
6-70
6-70
6-71
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Finish Damage
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it is bad
enough, it can damage your engine. A little pinging
noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered
normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that
a higher-octane fuel is necessary.
6-3
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasolines.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index) and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
In Canada, look for
the “Auto Makers’
Choice” label on
the pump.
Additives
Canada Only
6-4
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available
in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your
fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you’ll be driving.
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-5
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
6-6
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for
any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap
all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp
to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator
Lamp” in the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed
or on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle
located inside
the vehicle near
the parking
brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then just pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
6-9
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3400 V6 (Code E) engine, you’ll see the following:
A. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir
B. Lower Underhood Fuse Block
C. Upper Underhood Fuse Block
6-10
D.
E.
F.
G.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill Cap
H.
I.
J.
K.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 (Code K) engine, you’ll see the following:
A. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir
B. Lower Underhood Fuse Block
C. Upper Underhood Fuse Block
D. Radiator Pressure Cap
E. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(low in engine compartment)
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H.
I.
J.
K.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
United States
Canada
If the LOW ENG OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check your
engine oil level right away. For more information, see
“Low Oil Level Message” in the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
3400 (Code E)
V6 Engine
3800 (Code K)
V6 Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop located
near the front of the engine. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information on location.
6-12
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the lower mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
3400 (Code E)
V6 Engine
3800 (Code K)
V6 Engine
6-13
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
3400 (Code E)
V6 Engine
3800 (Code K)
V6 Engine
The engine oil fill cap is located toward the front of the
engine near the yellow-looped engine oil dipstick
handle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for more information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-14
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
As in the chart shown previously, if you have the
3400 V6 engine, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle.
However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going to
be 0_F (-18_C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
3400 (Code E) V6 Engine
6-15
As shown in the following chart, if you have the
3800 V6 engine, SAE 10W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s
going to be colder than 60_F (16_C) before your
next oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use
SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show
its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
3800 (Code K) V6 Engine
6-16
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System )
t
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls
below -20 F (-29 C), consider using either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both
will provide easier cold starting and better protection for
your engine at extremely low temperatures.
_
_
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the
oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
6-17
How to Reset the Change Engine Oil Message
4. Scroll until OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on,
reset the system.
5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
t
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message use one
of the following procedures:
6. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will be
displayed for one second.
7. Once the indicator has been reset, scroll until EXIT
appears on the display.
8. Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify the exit.
Using the Radio
Using the accelerator pedal
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON, with the radio off.
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP button on the radio for
at least five seconds until SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message flashes, the system is reset. However, if
it stays on, it did not reset. You’ll need to repeat the
reset procedure.
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrow to scroll
through the main menu.
6-18
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for more information on location.
To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do
the following:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you
have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
1. Loosen the two clips on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing and lift the filter cover tabs out
of the housing.
6-19
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Check or install a new engine air cleaner/filter.
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts”
in the Index.
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
slots on the housing. A notch on the sides of the
filter cover will indicate the correct engagement.
Reinstall the two clips on the top of the housing
when you are finished.
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
6-20
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, the passenger
compartment air filter is located underneath the hood
just below the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle (underneath the air inlet grille).
The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering the
module. Like your engine’s air cleaner/filter, it may
need to be changed periodically. For information on
how often to change the passenger compartment air
filter, see “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
7. Remove the air deflector grille in the compartment.
2. Raise the hood.
8. Remove the old passenger compartment air filter.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
9. Then reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
4. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from the passenger’s
side of the vehicle halfway to center.
For the type of filter to use, see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
6-21
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-22
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading
if you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
Checking the Fluid Level
D
D
D
D
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may
have to drive longer.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
6-23
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
3400 (Code E)
V6 Engine
3800 (Code K)
V6 Engine
The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the red loop near
the back of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-24
3400 (Code E)
V6 Engine
3800 (Code K)
V6 Engine
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
6-25
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your
radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-26
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-27
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
mark or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher.
United States
Canada
If this LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and
stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
The coolant recovery tank is located between the power
steering fluid reservoir and the upper underhood fuse
block in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.
6-28
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -when the engine and radiator are hot.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see “Cooling System” in the Index.
6-29
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side.
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrow on the cap
lines up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle near the diagonal cross brace. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for reservoir location.
6-30
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool
down, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean,
then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
What to Use
When the 3400 V6 engine compartment is hot, the level
should be at the H mark. When it’s cold, the level should
be at the C mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you
should add fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for reservoir location.
Adding Washer Fluid
For the 3800 V6 engine, the level should be at the HOT
mark when the engine compartment is hot. If the fluid is
at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
United States
Canada
When this message is displayed, it means the vehicle is
low on windshield washer fluid. You should add more
windshield washer fluid soon.
6-31
The windshield washer
fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle near the diagonal
cross brace.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.
D
D
6-32
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes
won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-33
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
6-34
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to
be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and
go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except
when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong
with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel
nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
6-35
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in -- be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes
can change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.
6-36
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-37
Headlamps, Front Parking, Turn Signal and
Sidemarker Lamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the air baffle.
3. Remove the two headlamp fasteners by pulling up
on them.
A. High-Beam Headlamp
B. Low-Beam Headlamp
4. Gently pull the headlamp assembly away from the
vehicle and remove the electrical connector.
C. Parking/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lamp
5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access to the bulbs.
6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from
the retaining ring by gently pulling it away from the
headlamp assembly.
6-38
7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
8. Install the electrical connector to the new bulb.
9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab
on the bulb base into the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn
clockwise until it stops.
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal and Rear
Sidemarker Lamps
A. Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
B. Tail/Stop Lamp
C. Turn Signal Lamp
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the
headlamp assembly.
11. Close the hood. Then, check the lamps.
Headlamp Aiming
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam
may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their
high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your
headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that you
take your vehicle to the dealer for service. However, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlamps by following
the procedure in the service manual for your vehicle.
1. Open the trunk. If your vehicle has a convenience
net, unhook the net from the upper wing nut.
2. Remove the nut and convenience net.
3. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.
6-39
4. Unscrew the two
remaining wing nuts.
10. Reinstall the assembly and the two lower wing nuts.
Make sure that the wires are not pinched between
the body of the vehicle and the mounting screws.
11. Reinstall the carpeting.
12. Reinstall the upper (convenience net) wing nut and
reattach convenience net, if equipped.
Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the two screws.
5. Pull the assembly from the body carefully.
6. To remove a socket, turn it counterclockwise and
pull it out.
7. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it.
8. Push the new bulb into the socket.
9. Push the socket back into the assembly. Tighten the
socket by turning it clockwise.
3. Pull the assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. To remove a socket, turn the socket
counterclockwise and pull it out.
5. Pull the old bulb out. Do not twist it.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket.
7. Push the socket back into the assembly.
Tighten the socket by turning it clockwise.
8. Reinstall the assembly with the two screws.
6-40
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice
a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield Wipers,
Blade Check” in the Index for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in
the Index. Here’s how to remove the wiper blades:
1. Turn on the wipers to the low wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the blade
connecting point and pull the blade assembly down
toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
6-41
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-42
D
D
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the
inside of the trunk lid, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-43
Tire Inflation Monitor System
The tire inflation monitor system can alert you to a large
change in the pressure of one tire. The system “learns”
the pressure at each tire throughout the operating speed
range of your vehicle. The system normally takes
between 45 and 90 minutes of driving to learn the tire
pressures. This time may be longer depending on
your individual driving habits. Learning need not be
accumulated during a single trip. Once learned, the
system will remember the tire pressures until the
system is recalibrated.
After the system has learned tire pressures with properly
inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message
will come on if the pressure in one tire becomes
12 psi (83 kPa) lower than the other three tires.
The tire inflation monitor system won’t alert you if
the pressure in more than one tire is low, if the system
is not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle is moving
faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
6-44
The tire inflation monitor system detects differences
in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in
tire pressure. The system can alert you about a low
tire -- but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.
See “Tires” in the Index.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes on,
you should stop as soon as you can and check all your
tires for damage. (If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes
Flat” in the Index.) Also check the tire pressure in all
four tires as soon as you can. See “Inflation - Tire
Pressure” in the Index.
The LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will also be
displayed (while the ignition is on) until you reset
(calibrate) the system.
Don’t reset the tire inflation monitor system without
first correcting the cause of the problem and checking
and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset
the system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the
system will not work properly and may not alert you
when a tire is low.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure, rotate your tires,
or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll
need to reset (calibrate) the tire inflation monitor
system. You’ll also need to reset the system whenever
you buy new tires and whenever the vehicle’s battery
has been disconnected.
To reset (calibrate) the system: The tire inflation
monitor system can be reset by turning the exterior lamp
control from OFF to parking lamps three times while the
ignition is in ON. It can also be reset through the radio
using the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON and turn the
radio off.
2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP button on the
radio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS
is displayed.
3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrow to scroll
through the main menu.
4. Scroll until TIRE MON appears on the display.
6. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime will
be heard to verify the new setting and DONE will be
displayed for one second.
7. Once the monitor has been reset, scroll until EXIT
appears on the display.
8. Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.
A chime will be heard to verify exit.
The system completes the calibration process
during driving.
The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of driving
in each of three speed ranges to “learn” tire pressures.
The speed ranges are 15 to 40 mph (25 to 65 km/h),
40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h) and above 65 mph
(105 km/h). When learning is complete, the system
will alert you after two to eight minutes if a tire is 12 psi
(83 kPa) different from the other three tires. Detection
thresholds may be higher and detection times may be
longer on rough roads, curves and at high speeds.
The system is not capable of detection at speeds
greater than 70 mph (110 km/h).
5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter the
submenu. RESET will be displayed.
6-45
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Reset the tire inflation monitor. See
“Resetting the Tire Inflation Monitor” in the Index.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-46
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-47
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-48
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance. Warning: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-49
Temperature -- A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-50
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
6-51
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
Use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-52
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.
Here are some cleaning tips:
D
D
D
D
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-53
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer
for this product.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Cleaning Leather
4. Let dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
dealer for this product.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6-54
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
A liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because
they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals
on the inside rear window, since they may have
to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are
used on the inside of the rear window, an
electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
6-55
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade
by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in
full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-56
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys,
etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
6-57
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
6-58
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
6-59
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6-60
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of your trunk lid.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-61
Electrical System
Headlamp Wiring
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The headlamp circuit is protected by individual fuses in
the upper underhood fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the fuse to blow. If this happens, have your
headlamp system checked right away.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
6-62
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
A circuit breaker in the driver’s side instrument panel
fuse block protects the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit
breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Driver’s Side Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block at the end of the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Pull off the cover labeled
FUSES to expose the fuses.
6-63
Mini Fuses
Description
PCM (CRANK)
Powertrain Control
Module (Crank)
CIG/AUX
Accommodated Device
(Accessory)
BCM
Body Control Module (Accessory)
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
ABS/PCM
Anti-Lock Brake System,
Powertrain Control Module,
Brake Switch, Crank Relay,
Canister Vent Solenoid
(Run, Crank)
STOP
Brake Lamps, Body Control
Module (Run, Crank)
Mini Fuses
Description
TURN SIGNAL
Turn Signal Flashers
PCM/
BCM/CLSTR
Powertrain Control Module,
Body Control Module,
Cluster (Ignition 0)
CRUISE
Cruise Control Steering
Column Controls
AC/CRUISE
HVAC Temp Door Motors &
Module, Cruise Control Module
A/C FAN
HVAC Blower
WSW
6-64
Windshield Wipers,
Windshield Washer
Mini Fuses
Description
Circuit Breaker
Description
STR COL
Steering Wheel Lighting
Power Window, Sunroof Breaker
DR LK
Body Control Module,
Door Lock Controls
RETAINED
ACCESSORY
PWR BRKR
PWR MIR
Power Mirrors
Circuit Relay
Description
CLSTR/BCM
Cluster, Body Control Module,
Data Link Connector (Battery),
TrapAlert System
RETAINED
ACCESSORY
PWR RELAY
Retained Accessory Power Relay
Driver’s Heated Seat, Body
Control Module, Battery
Controlled Loads
HEADLAMP
RELAY
Headlamp Relay
t
LH HTD
ST/BCM
6-65
Passenger’s Side Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are in a fuse
block at the end of the
instrument panel on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Pull off the cover
labeled FUSES to expose
the fuses.
Additional fuses are in the underhood fuse block on the
passenger’s side of the engine compartment.
6-66
Mini Fuses
Description
RH HTD ST
Passenger Heated Seat
PWR DROP
Accommodated Device
B/U LP
Back-Up Lamps
DIC/RKE
Driver Information Center,
Remote Keyless Entry, HVAC
Mini Fuses
Description
Circuit Relay
Description
TRK/ROOF BRP
Trunk Lamps, Headliner Lamps
PARK LP RELAY
Parking Lamp Relay
HVAC BLO
HVAC Blower Relay
Back-up Lamps Relay
I/P BRP
Instrument Panel Footwell
Lamps, Glovebox Lamps
BACKUP
LP RELAY
BATT RUN
DOWN
PROTECTION
RELAY
Battery Run Down
Protection Relay
REAR
DEFOG RELAY
Rear Defogger Relay, Heated
Mirror Relay
Circuit Breaker
Description
PWR
SEATS BRKR
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
REAR
DEFOG BRKR
Rear Defogger Breaker
HTD MIR
Heated Mirrors
BRK SW
Brake Switch
HAZ SW
Hazard Switch
REAR PRK LP
Rear Parking Lamps
AUX PWR
Accessory Power
Outlet (Battery)
C/LTR
Cigarette Lighter
RADIO
Radio, Radio Amplifier
FRT PARK LP
Front Parking Lamps,
Instrumentation Lighting
6-67
Underhood Fuse Block (Upper)
Some fuses are in a fuse block in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
“Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
Circuit Relay
FUEL PUMP
DRL RELAY
A.I.R. RELAY
CRANK RLY
6-68
Description
Fuel Pump
Daytime Running Lamps
Air Induction Reaction Relay
Starter (Crank) Relay
Circuit Relay
HORNS
FOG LTS
Maxi Fuses
LEFT I/P
RT I/P #1
RT I/P #2
U/HOOD #1
Mini Fuses
HORN RLY
BLANK
BLANK
FOG RLY
F/PMP RLY
DRL/EXIT LTS
EXT LTS
PCM
A/C
RLY (CMPR)
Description
Horn
Fog Lamps
Description
Left Fuse (Battery)
Right Fuse (Battery)
Right Fuse (Battery)
Underhood (Top) Fuse Block
Description
Horn Relay
Blank
Blank
Fog Lamps Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
Low (Left Front) & High
(Left Front) Headlamps
Low (Right Front) & High
(Right Front) Headlamps
PCM Battery
HVAC Compressor
Relay & Generator
Underhood Fuse Block (Lower)
Circuit Relay
Description
Some fuses are in a fuse block in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
“Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
FAN CONT #1
Primary Cooling Fan
(Driver’s Side)
IGN RELAY
Ignition Relay
A/C CMPR
HVAC Compressor
Maxi Fuses
Description
IGN SW
Ignition Switch
RT I/P #3
Rear Defogger, Audio System
U/HOOD #2
Ignition Relay, AIR Pump
COOLING FANS
Cooling Fans (Battery)
Mini Fuses
Description
FAN CONT
#2 & #3
Cooling Fan Control
Relays #2 & #3
FAN CONT #1
Cooling Fan Control Relays #1
Circuit Relay
Description
AIR PMP RLY
FAN CONT #3
Secondary Cooling Fan
(Passenger’s Side)
Air Induction Reaction Pump
Relay (Battery)
FUEL INJ
Fuel Injectors
FAN CONT #2
Cooling Fan Control Relay
TRANS SOL
Transmission Solenoids
A/C RLY (COIL)
HVAC Control Relay
6-69
Mini Fuses
Description
Capacities and Specifications
ENG DEVICES
Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass
Air Flow Sensor (MAF), AIR
Pump Relay & Valve Control
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
DFI MDL
Direct Fire Ignition Module
OXY SEN
Oxygen Sensors
(Pre and Post Converter)
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . 3357NAK or 3457NAK
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Headlamp, High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Headlamp, Low-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
6-70
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . 7.4 quarts (7.0 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . 10.0 quarts (9.5 L)
When draining/replacing converter, more fluid will
be needed.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3400 (Code E) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 quarts (10.7 L)
3800 (Code K) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.0 L)
Engine Oil with Filter
3400 (Code E) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 quarts (4.1 L)
3800 (Code K) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 quarts (4.1 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 U.S. gallons (64.0 L)
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure
to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
Engine Specifications
3400 (LA1) V6 Engine
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 CID
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3-4-5-6
3800 (L36) V6 Engine
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 CID
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Capacity
If you do your own service work, you’ll need the proper
service manual. See “Doing Your Own Service Work” in
the Index for additional information. It is recommended
that service work on your air conditioning system be
performed by a qualified technician.
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant R–134a . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 lbs. (1.09 kg)
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1614C*
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 10406026
Engine Oil Filter
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF47*
Automatic Transmission Filter
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24206433*
Spark Plugs
3400 (Code E) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-940*
3800 (Code K) V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-921*
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Engines
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shepherd’s Hook
*AC DelcoR part number.
Use Refrigerant R134a System
6-71
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7- 2
7- 4
7- 5
7- 15
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Scheduled Maintenance
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7- 20
7- 22
7- 24
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer for details.
7-2
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t
know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week. Or
you may drive long distances all the time in very hot,
dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making
deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands
or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
7-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of
this vehicle.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will not
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
@ Whenever the tires are rotated, the Tire Inflation
Monitor System must be reset.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C
of this schedule.
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
GM Oil Life System (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system.
t
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index
for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
7-6
Scheduled Maintenance
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
7-8
Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
7-10
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
7-12
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Scheduled Maintenance
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
pattern and additional information. (See footnote @.) (See footnote +.)
7-13
Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-14
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
as shown in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires”
in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-15
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Trunk Release Sensor Check
At least twice a year, check to see if the system is
working properly. Make sure the horn chirps and
the latch releases. Follow the disabling procedure.
See “Trunk Release Sensor” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-16
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed.
See “Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the
system and repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for
the body doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glove box door,
console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn
off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
7-17
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
7-18
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
D The key should turn to OFF only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
D The key should come out only in OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
7-19
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
7-20
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
Fuel System Inspection
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least
once a year.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-21
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol of the proper viscosity.
To determine the preferred
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
7-22
50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only
GM GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR
or HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power
Steering System
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer
Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
7-23
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-24
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it
and proceed with any other venue for relief available
to you.
8-3
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
8-4
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)
From:
Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to
a nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2002 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-6
D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over-the-phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
Roadside Courtesy Care provides:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2002 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2002 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies
that will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
8-7
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or
call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-8
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle
ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
8-9
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
GENERAL MOTORS
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-11
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
Service Manuals
Owner’s Information
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case
Unit Repair Manual
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments and specifications
for GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist
in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 – Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
8-12
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds.
Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-25
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-26
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-27
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-28
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED